Canon | PowerShot N2 | User guide | Canon PowerShot N2 User guide

Canon PowerShot N2 User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۱‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪©CANON INC. 2014‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV5FA2N0‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻧﺯﻉ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫‪CA-DC30/CA-DC30E‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*microSD‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*microSDHC‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*microSDXC‬‬
‫* ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪/ON/OFF‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ([‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫● =‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ” ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ“ ﻭ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ -‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺷﺣﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ([‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(۱۱‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪.(۸۱ =) NFC‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲۳ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۲۳ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۲٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪۳ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ‪۲٤ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۷ .....................................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪۱۰ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۱۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۲۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۲۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪۳۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۱٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‪۳۰ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۳۰ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۳۱ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪۳۱ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ‪۳۲ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱٤ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‪۱٤ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٥ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ‪۱٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٦ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۷ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۸ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱۹ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۱۹ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۱۹ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪۲۲ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ ‪۳۳ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳۳ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۳۳ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳٦ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۳٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪۳۷ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۳۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۳۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪٤۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ )ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‪٥۲ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ‪٤۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٤۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۱ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪٤۱ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪٤۲ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤۲ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤۳ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‪٥٤ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ( ‪٥٥ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ( ‪٥٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪٥٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ(‪٥٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‪٥۷ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪٥۷ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪٤۳ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٤٥ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪٤٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‪٤۷ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪٤۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٥۸ ........................................................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٥۸ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٥۹ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٥۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪٥۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۰ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٤۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪٦۰ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‪٤۹ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٤۹ ............... (4:3‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤۹ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦۱ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪٦۱ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪٦۱ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‪٥۰ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪٦۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪٥۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۱ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٦۲ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٥۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪٥۰ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥۱ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪٥۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٦۳ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٦۳ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٦٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ( ‪٦٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪٦٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٦٥ ................................................................... GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٦٥ .......‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪٦٦ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٦٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪٦٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۷۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۷۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۷۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ‪٦۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪٦۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪٦۷ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪٦۷ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪٦۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪٦۹ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪٦۹ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪۷۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۷۰ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪۷۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪۷۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۷۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۷۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۷۲ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۷۲ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۷۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۷۳ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۷۳ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۷٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۷٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۷٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۷٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۷٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۷٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‪۷٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪۷۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ‪۷۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۸۰ ............................................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ‪۸۰ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۸۱ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ‪۸۱ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۸۳ ..............................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۸٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۸٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۸٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۸٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۸٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۸٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪۸۸ ...............‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪۸۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۸۸ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۸۹ ................................................. WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۹۱ .............................................WPS‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۹۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪۹۲ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۹۲ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪۹۲ .....................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪۹٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۹٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪۹٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۹۷ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۹ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ‪۹۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۰۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪۱۰۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۹ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۰۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪۱۱۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱۱۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۱۰ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۰۰ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۰۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۰۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۰۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۰۲ .....................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۰۲ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪۱۰۳ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۱۱۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱۱۲ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪۱۱۲ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۳ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۳ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۰٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۰٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪۱۱٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۱٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۱٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۰٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۱۰٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۰٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱۰٥ ...................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۱۱ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۱۰٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۰٦ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪۱۰٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۰۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۰۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۰۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۰۸ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۰۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۰۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۷ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱۱۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱۱۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۱۱۹ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۱۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۱۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۱۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱۱۹ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۳٥ .................................................................NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ‪۱۳٥ ...................................CA-DC30/CA-DC30E‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۲۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۲۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۰ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۳٦ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱۲۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۱۳۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱۲۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۱۳۸ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۱۳۸ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪۱۳۹ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۰ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۲٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۲۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪۱۲۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۲۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‪۱۲۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۲۸ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱۲۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۲۹ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ............................................................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۳۰ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ ‪۱۳۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ ‪۱۳۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۳۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪۱۳۲ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱۳۳ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳ .................................................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪۱۳۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۳۳ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۳٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۳٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۳٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۳٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۱۳٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۱۳٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۳٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۲٥ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ = ‪۳۰‬‬‫● ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳۰ = -‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ )ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‬
‫ = ‪٥۲‬‬‫● ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪٦۳‬‬‫● ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۷۲‬‬‫● ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۸۰ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺃﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺫﻯ ﺑﺑﺻﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ(‪ُ :‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺑﺻﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﻡ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺿﻌﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﺎﻥ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻭ– ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺛﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ )‪ (۱‬ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻁﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ؛ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ (۲‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :CA-DC30‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺻِ ﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ‪ :CA-DC30E‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ .(۲۱‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ“ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺷﺣﻥ ‪.USB‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺭ ّﻛﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (۱۷‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪ ،(۱۱۲ = ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ .(۱‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ .(۲‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺗﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺟﻌﻠﻙ ﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ )= ‪.((۱٥‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪ (۲٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ )= ‪.((۱٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۸۰ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻁﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺿﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫● ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻁﺭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺭﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻗﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‬
‫)= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۲۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )‪ (۱‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۱۳۲ = – ۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ] [] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤۳‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫[ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪(۱۰۸ = ،۲٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺟﻌﻠﻙ ﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻟﻣﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﻬﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(۷۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٦۸‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٦۹‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۷۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪(۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱۱۹‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٦۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )= ‪ً (٦۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳۹ = ،۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۳۳ =) ۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۳ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۳ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ )= ‪ (۱۰٦‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۱۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۷‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪” ،‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( )= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻡ*‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [ )= ‪ ،(٤۳ = ،۳۸‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ( ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ )ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻧﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ )= ‪ .(٤٤‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ [ ] :‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺿﻲء ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻔﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ(*‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )‪ IS‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ )ﻧﺷﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪.(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٦۱‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥۸‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ .(٤۲‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭ ًﺑﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۲‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﻛﻥ )ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺑﺎﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪ .(٤۳‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺫﻱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(٤۱‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺗﻬﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ( ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٤۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﻳﻥ ”ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ“ ﻭ”ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻣﻝء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺱ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء )ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺳﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )= ‪ ،(۲٦‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (٤۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۱۱٤‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻱٍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (٦۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٥۹٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۱۰ × ۱٤۸ − ٤۲۰ × ۲۹۷) A3 – A5‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰ ،‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻁﻭﻁ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪-AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺗﺄﻟ ًﻘﺎ؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳَﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺱ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳۰‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪ (۳۳ =) “(Smart Auto‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ )= ‪.(٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(٤۸‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ (۳۳ =) “(Auto‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ )= ‪– ٥۹‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(٦۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦۰ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،(٦۱ = ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ (۲۷ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ -2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻣﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪200 ،100‬‬
‫‪800 ،400‬‬
‫‪3200 ،1600‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [IS‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ*‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ( )= ‪.(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٦۱‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [2‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ .(۱‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ .(۲‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ )= ‪.((۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻁﻭﻻً‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻁﻭﻻً( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ “GPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ“‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪.(۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [---‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﱠﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٤‬ﻫﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪[FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ [FUNC.‬ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪ ،(٦٤‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳۰‬ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۳‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(٦۷‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۰‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۷۷‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(۷۲‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ .(۷۰‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“ )= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۳۰‬ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‬
‫]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء“ )= ‪ ،(٦۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪ ،(٦۷‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۲‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۷٤‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۲۸ =) ۲‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۷٤‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(٦۳‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(۷۱‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۷۲‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۱۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺟﻭﻡ )‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows 7‬ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﺳﻳﺔ )ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻭ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.(۸۰ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۷۷‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ]‬
‫]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺫﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱۱۲ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۳٥ = ،۳۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ(“ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪(DPS over IP‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۸۱‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۸۳ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (N‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (N‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPad‬ﺃﻭ ‪،iPod touch‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪App‬‬
‫‪ Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ )= ‪ .(۲۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ؛ ﻭﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪(N‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩﺙ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺁﺧﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‬
‫< ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ < ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻣﺗﻠﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ“ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٦ – ٤‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ۳ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۸۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۸۳ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ (۹۱ =) “WPS‬ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(۸۹ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٦ – ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (۸۳ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺄﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺯﺭ“ )= ‪ (۸۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۸۳ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ( ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۸٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) USB‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪/Install without connecting the device‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺳﺗﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﻬﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ < ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[‬
‫< ]‪< [Canon Utilities] > [CameraWindow‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ )ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ )ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ( ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪.(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪.(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(۱۳۳ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫)‪ (۸۹ = ،WPS‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ )= ‪ .(۹۱‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ WPA2-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ ‪WPA-‬‬
‫)‪ PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ ‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”‪ “۱‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪< [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ )= ‪ .(۲۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺩﺃ“ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۷٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۸۹ =) “WPS‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪SSID‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﺗﺻﻠﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]*[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(۸۹ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۸۹ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۸۹ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۹۱ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺿﻭ )ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۷‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ )= ‪ .(۲۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۸۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۹۱ =) “WPS‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (۹۲ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۷٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۷٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۷٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪{.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .(٤ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ( ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[<‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۹۲ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ <‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(۸۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“ )= ‪.(۹٥‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱۱۲ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪،۸۳ = ،۸۱‬‬
‫= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ .(۱۷‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۸۳ = ،۸۱‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(۱۰٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۰٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(۱۰٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۰٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (٦۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(۲۳‬ﻭﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺷﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ]ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۸‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۸۰ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪(۱۰۷‬‬‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۸۰ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫‪CA-DC30/‬‬
‫‪CA-DC30E‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC70‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫*ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LB/CB-2LBE‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ACK-DC70‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC70‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۷‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ“ )= ‪.((۱٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫● ‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬‫ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺳﺗﺛﻧﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪،PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ )= ‪.(۱۷ = ،۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۷ = ،۱٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(٦۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٤۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‪ ،‬ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ “FUNC.‬ﻭ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۰ = – ۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ .(٤۳‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۱۰٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳٤ = ،۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲۳‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬‫=‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ) ‪.(٤۹‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۸٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۱۳۳‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪ .(۱۰۱‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۰٥ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۷‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (٥۸ = ،٥۲ = ،۳۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫● ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟـ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ )= ‪.(٤۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ!‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫‪MP4‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/.‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،*(٦۹‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،*(۷۰‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،*(۷٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۷٥‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪،*(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪*(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱۱۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ُﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫*ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫) ́˻(‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫) ˾˻(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)̂(‬
‫) ˹˺( ) ̀˻( ) ˿˻(‬
‫) ́˺(‬
‫) ̂˺(‬
‫) ˹˼( ) ̂˻(‬
‫) ˽˻(‬
‫) ˼˻( ) ˻˻( ) ˺˻(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۷‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۱ = ،٤۲‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫‪(٤۳ =) Drive mode‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫)‪(۱۰‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( )= ‪(۲۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫) ̀˺( ) ˿˺( ) ˾˺() ˽˺( ) ˼˺() ˻˺() ˺˺(‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(۳۹ =) IS‬‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۰‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫) ˹˻(‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪*(۱۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٥۹ =) AE‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۲۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪(۲٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ( )= ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ — ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ — ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ )= ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫) ˹˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫) ˻˺(‬
‫) ˼˺(‬
‫) ˽˺(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۷۹‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫)˽(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫) ˹˻(‬
‫) ̂˺( ) ́˺( ) ̀˺(‬
‫) ˿˺(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،(٦۰ =) ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۰۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪) MOV ،(٤۹‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪.۰‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۷۹‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫) ˾˺(‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۷‬‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫)̂( )́()̀(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫) ˺˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۲۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪((۷۹‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ 10 /‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ‪ 2 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪(٤۳ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 4/‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ 8/‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(٦۱ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ[ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ )= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹ = ،۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫= ‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫= ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۷٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫= ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۷۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫)ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦٫۱‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۸‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪) 5.0 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 40.0‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪) 28 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 224‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۷٫۱‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۲٫۸‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٤٦۱،۰۰۰ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MP4 :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬؛ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪) MPEG-4 AAC-LC‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ((‬
‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ACK-DC70‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲٫۳ x ٦۲٫۰ x ۸۰٫۹‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ ۲۰۱‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11g/n) OFDM‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11b) DSSS‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ*‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ*‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫*‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS ۲‬‬
‫‪ (PC2156/PC2183) ۱۱ – ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PC2181) ۱۳ – ۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‬
‫‪،WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP) ،WEP‬‬
‫)‪WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ ۸۹٦ – ۲۸‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪۲۰۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ* (‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫‪ ۳٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging‬‬
‫‪.(CIPA) Products Association‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬
‫‪838‬‬
‫‪3374‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬
‫‪1508‬‬
‫‪6073‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۲‬‬
‫‪3M/2048x1536‬‬
‫‪4163‬‬
‫‪16755‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫‪20124‬‬
‫‪80988‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٤۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪٥‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ۳٤‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۲٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ۲۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫(‬
‫‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۱٫۷‬ﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ٥۰ - ۱۰ :‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺑﺔ )‬
‫*ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۲۰ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫*(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-9L‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫*(‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫*(‬
‫*ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۲۰ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۲٫۷‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ‪CA-DC30/CA-DC30E‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1/2000 – 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۸۷۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱٥٫۳ × ٤۳٫۱ × ۱٤٫٦‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ ۲۱‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪) f/3.0 / f/9.0‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) f/5.9 / f/18‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲٤۰ – ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰ /٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ ۷ ،‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( – ‪ ۱۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‪ ۰٫۰۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( – ‪ ۰٫۰٤٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٥٫۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۰٫٥٥ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-9L‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٤۲‬‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ( ‪۱۱٤ ،۸٦‬‬
‫‪۹۲ ،۸۰ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪٦٥ GPS‬‬
‫‪۱۱۷ ،۱۱۲ PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪٥۳ ،٤۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٦۱ ،٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۱٥ ،۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪٤۰ ،۳٤ ،۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٥ ،۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱۲۸ ،۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ← ۱۱۲‬ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ← ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫← ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪٥۰ ،۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) Auto‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳۳ ،۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ،۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥۸ AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪microSD/microSDHC/‬‬
‫‪ ← microSDXC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۱٥ ،۸٦‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ← ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۰ ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۲ ،۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۸۰ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۳ ،۱۱۲ AC‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۳۲ ،۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۸۳ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ← ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۱ IS‬‬
‫ﻫـ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪٤۳‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪،WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫● ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺟﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ App Store‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ iPad‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪SD-3C, LLC.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪HDMI Licensing, LLC.‬‬
‫● ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ®‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪ Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or‬‬
‫‪decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for‬‬
‫‪a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider‬‬
‫‪licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant‬‬
‫‪video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising